Installation Instructions

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor with 100 mm to 165 mm Frame Size

Catalog Numbers MPF-A310 MPF-A320 MPF-A330 MPF-A430 MPF-A4530 MPF-A4540 MPF-A540 MPF-B310 MPF-B320 MPF-B330 MPF-B430 MPF-B4530 MPF-B4540 MPF-B540

Topic Page

Important User Information 2

Catalog Number Explanation 3

Before You Begin 4

Install the Motor 8

Verify Connector O-ring and Backshell Seal 8

Change Connector Orientation 9

Mount the Motor 12

Connector Data 15

Mounting Dimensions 17

Motor Load Force Ratings 20

Accessory Kits 22

Specifications 25

Additional Resources 26

2 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Important User InformationSolid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI-11 is available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures

2 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Important User InformationSolid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI-11 is available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 3

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Catalog Number Explanation

FACTORY DESIGNATED OPTIONS

A = Standard

MOUNTING FLANGE

B = IEC Metric - Oversized

BRAKE

2 = No Brake

4 = 24V DC Brake

CONNECTORS

7 = Circular DIN Right Angle 180deg Rotatable

ENCLOSURESHAFT KEYSHAFT SEAL

J = IP66IP67 HousingShaft KeyShaft Seal

FEEDBACK

M = Multi-turn High Resolution Encoder

S = Single-turn High Resolution Encoder

RATED SPEED

A = 500 rpm

B = 1000 rpm

C = 1500 rpm

D = 2000 rpm

E = 2500 rpm

F = 3000 rpm

G = 3250 rpm

H = 3500 rpm

J = 3750 rpm

K = 4000 rpm

L = 4250 rpm

M = 4500 rpm

N = 4750 rpm

P = 5000 rpm

Q = 5250 rpm

R = 5500 rpm

S = 5750 rpm

T = 6000 rpm

MAGNET STACK LENGTH (80 = 80 INCHES)

FRAME SIZE (IEC 72-1 FLANGE NUMBER)

3 = 100 mm

4 = 115 mm

45 = 130 mm

5 = 165 mm

VOLTAGE RATING

A = 230 V AC

B = 460 V AC

SERIES TYPE

F = Food Grade

SERIES

MP = MP-Series

MP F - B 5 40 K - M J 7 2 B A

4 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

About the MP-Series Food Grade MotorsMP-Series food grade (MPF) motors feature single-turn or multi-turn high resolution encoders and are available with 24V DC brakes These compact brushless servo motors combine the characteristics of the MP-Series low-inertia motors with unique features designed for food and beverage applications

Before You BeginRemove all packing material wedges and braces from within and around the item After unpacking verify the nameplate catalog number against the purchase order

1 Remove the motor carefully from its shipping container

2 Visually inspect the motor frame shaft mounting pilot and encoder for damage

3 Notify the carrier of any shipping damage immediately

Prolonging Motor LifeThoughtful design and proper maintenance can increase the life of a servo motor Follow these guidelines to maximize the life of a servo motor within a food processing environment

bull Always provide a drip loop in each cable to carry liquids away from the connection to the motor

bull Avoid spraying liquids under high pressure directly on the junction of the motor shaft housing connectors and the enclosure joints Fluids under high pressure when forced around worn seals can contaminate the motor bearings and significantly shorten the life of a servo motor

bull If design requirements permit provide shields that protect the motor housing shaft seals and their junctions from product contamination caustic agents and high pressure fluids

bull Replace the shaft seal at or before its expected lifetime of 12 months Refer to Shaft Seals for more information on shaft seals

ATTENTION Do not attempt to open or modify this motor beyond changing the connector orientation as described in Change Connector Orientation

Only an authorized Allen-Bradley repair center shall service this item Refer to Rockwell Automation Support for assistance to locate the nearest repair center

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 5

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

bull Inspect the motor and seals for damage or wear on a regular basis If damage or excessive wear is observed replace the item

bull If desired you may seal the motor front flange to the driven equipment by applying a bead of food grade RTV around the periphery of the joint between the motor and the machine surfaces Use of a gasket or RTV on the mating surfaces is not recommended as this can cause misalignment of the shaft and result in damage to the motor andor driven equipment

bull The brake option on this servo motor is a spring-set holding brake that releases when voltage is applied to the brake coil A separate power source is required to disengage the brake This power source can be applied by a servo motor controller or manual operator control

If system main power fails holding brakes can withstand occasional use as stopping brakes However this creates rotational mechanical backlash that is potentially damaging to the system increases brake wear and reduces brake life

Using Shaft Seals A seal is installed on the motor shaft to protect the front bearing from fluids or fine dust that could contaminate the motor bearing and reduce its lifetime An IP66IP67 rating for the motor requires the use of shaft seals connectors and cables that provide an environmental seal equal to or exceeding the rating

bull Refer to Specifications for a brief description of the IP ratings

bull Refer to Shaft Seals to find the catalog numbers of seal kits for your motor

bull Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 to find environmentally sealed connectors and cables that are compatible with MP-Series motors

IMPORTANT Holding brakes are not designed to stop rotation of the motor shaft nor are they intended to be used as a safety device They are designed to hold a motor shaft at 0 rpm for up to the rated brake holding torque

The recommended method of preventing motor shaft rotation is a four step process first - command the servo drive to 0 rpm second - verify the motor is at 0 rpm third - engage the brake and fourth - disable the drive

Disabling the drive removes the potential for brake wear caused by a badly tuned servo system oscillating the shaft

4 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

About the MP-Series Food Grade MotorsMP-Series food grade (MPF) motors feature single-turn or multi-turn high resolution encoders and are available with 24V DC brakes These compact brushless servo motors combine the characteristics of the MP-Series low-inertia motors with unique features designed for food and beverage applications

Before You BeginRemove all packing material wedges and braces from within and around the item After unpacking verify the nameplate catalog number against the purchase order

1 Remove the motor carefully from its shipping container

2 Visually inspect the motor frame shaft mounting pilot and encoder for damage

3 Notify the carrier of any shipping damage immediately

Prolonging Motor LifeThoughtful design and proper maintenance can increase the life of a servo motor Follow these guidelines to maximize the life of a servo motor within a food processing environment

bull Always provide a drip loop in each cable to carry liquids away from the connection to the motor

bull Avoid spraying liquids under high pressure directly on the junction of the motor shaft housing connectors and the enclosure joints Fluids under high pressure when forced around worn seals can contaminate the motor bearings and significantly shorten the life of a servo motor

bull If design requirements permit provide shields that protect the motor housing shaft seals and their junctions from product contamination caustic agents and high pressure fluids

bull Replace the shaft seal at or before its expected lifetime of 12 months Refer to Shaft Seals for more information on shaft seals

ATTENTION Do not attempt to open or modify this motor beyond changing the connector orientation as described in Change Connector Orientation

Only an authorized Allen-Bradley repair center shall service this item Refer to Rockwell Automation Support for assistance to locate the nearest repair center

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 5

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

bull Inspect the motor and seals for damage or wear on a regular basis If damage or excessive wear is observed replace the item

bull If desired you may seal the motor front flange to the driven equipment by applying a bead of food grade RTV around the periphery of the joint between the motor and the machine surfaces Use of a gasket or RTV on the mating surfaces is not recommended as this can cause misalignment of the shaft and result in damage to the motor andor driven equipment

bull The brake option on this servo motor is a spring-set holding brake that releases when voltage is applied to the brake coil A separate power source is required to disengage the brake This power source can be applied by a servo motor controller or manual operator control

If system main power fails holding brakes can withstand occasional use as stopping brakes However this creates rotational mechanical backlash that is potentially damaging to the system increases brake wear and reduces brake life

Using Shaft Seals A seal is installed on the motor shaft to protect the front bearing from fluids or fine dust that could contaminate the motor bearing and reduce its lifetime An IP66IP67 rating for the motor requires the use of shaft seals connectors and cables that provide an environmental seal equal to or exceeding the rating

bull Refer to Specifications for a brief description of the IP ratings

bull Refer to Shaft Seals to find the catalog numbers of seal kits for your motor

bull Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 to find environmentally sealed connectors and cables that are compatible with MP-Series motors

IMPORTANT Holding brakes are not designed to stop rotation of the motor shaft nor are they intended to be used as a safety device They are designed to hold a motor shaft at 0 rpm for up to the rated brake holding torque

The recommended method of preventing motor shaft rotation is a four step process first - command the servo drive to 0 rpm second - verify the motor is at 0 rpm third - engage the brake and fourth - disable the drive

Disabling the drive removes the potential for brake wear caused by a badly tuned servo system oscillating the shaft

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 5

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

bull Inspect the motor and seals for damage or wear on a regular basis If damage or excessive wear is observed replace the item

bull If desired you may seal the motor front flange to the driven equipment by applying a bead of food grade RTV around the periphery of the joint between the motor and the machine surfaces Use of a gasket or RTV on the mating surfaces is not recommended as this can cause misalignment of the shaft and result in damage to the motor andor driven equipment

bull The brake option on this servo motor is a spring-set holding brake that releases when voltage is applied to the brake coil A separate power source is required to disengage the brake This power source can be applied by a servo motor controller or manual operator control

If system main power fails holding brakes can withstand occasional use as stopping brakes However this creates rotational mechanical backlash that is potentially damaging to the system increases brake wear and reduces brake life

Using Shaft Seals A seal is installed on the motor shaft to protect the front bearing from fluids or fine dust that could contaminate the motor bearing and reduce its lifetime An IP66IP67 rating for the motor requires the use of shaft seals connectors and cables that provide an environmental seal equal to or exceeding the rating

bull Refer to Specifications for a brief description of the IP ratings

bull Refer to Shaft Seals to find the catalog numbers of seal kits for your motor

bull Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 to find environmentally sealed connectors and cables that are compatible with MP-Series motors

IMPORTANT Holding brakes are not designed to stop rotation of the motor shaft nor are they intended to be used as a safety device They are designed to hold a motor shaft at 0 rpm for up to the rated brake holding torque

The recommended method of preventing motor shaft rotation is a four step process first - command the servo drive to 0 rpm second - verify the motor is at 0 rpm third - engage the brake and fourth - disable the drive

Disabling the drive removes the potential for brake wear caused by a badly tuned servo system oscillating the shaft

6 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Using Couplings and PulleysMechanical connections to the motor shaft such as couplings and pulleys require a torsionally rigid coupling or a reinforced timing belt The high dynamic performance of servo motors can cause couplings pulleys or belts to loosen or slip over time A loose or slipping connection causes system instability and can damage the motor shaft All connections between the system and the servo motor shaft must be rigid to achieve an acceptable response from the system Periodically inspect connections to verify their rigidity

When mounting couplings or pulleys to the motor shaft make sure that the connections are properly aligned and that axial and radial loads are within the specifications of the motor Refer to Shaft Seals for guidelines to achieve 20000 hours of motor bearing life

A shaft key provides a rigid mechanical connection with the potential for self-alignment when the key is properly installed These sections provide additional information

bull Refer to Mounting Dimensions for information about the key and shaft keyway

bull Refer to Shaft Key for recommendations on how to remove and install a shaft key

ATTENTION Damage may occur to the motor bearings and the feedback device if sharp impact is applied to the shaft during installation of couplings and pulleys Damage to the feedback device may result from applying leverage to the motor mounting face when removing devices mounted on the motor shaft

Do not strike the shaft couplings or pulleys with tools during installation or removal Use a wheel puller to apply pressure from the user end of the shaft to remove any device from the motor shaft

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 7

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Preventing Electrical NoiseElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) commonly called electrical noise can reduce motor performance Effective techniques to counter EMI include filtering the AC power use of shielded cables separating signal cables from power wiring and practicing good grounding techniques

Follow these guidelines to avoid the effects of EMI

bull Isolate the power transformers or install line filters on all AC input power lines

bull Physically separate signal cables from motor cabling and power wiring Do not route signal cables with motor and power wires or over the vent openings of servo drives

bull Ground all equipment using a single-point parallel ground system that employs ground bus bars or large straps If necessary use additional electrical noise reduction techniques to reduce EMI in noisy environments

Refer to System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual publication GMC-RM001 for additional information on reducing the effects of EMI

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 7

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Preventing Electrical NoiseElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) commonly called electrical noise can reduce motor performance Effective techniques to counter EMI include filtering the AC power use of shielded cables separating signal cables from power wiring and practicing good grounding techniques

Follow these guidelines to avoid the effects of EMI

bull Isolate the power transformers or install line filters on all AC input power lines

bull Physically separate signal cables from motor cabling and power wiring Do not route signal cables with motor and power wires or over the vent openings of servo drives

bull Ground all equipment using a single-point parallel ground system that employs ground bus bars or large straps If necessary use additional electrical noise reduction techniques to reduce EMI in noisy environments

Refer to System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual publication GMC-RM001 for additional information on reducing the effects of EMI

8 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Install the Motor All motors include a mounting pilot for aligning the motor on the machine Preferred fasteners are stainless steel The installation must comply with all local regulations and use equipment and installation practices that promote safety and electromagnetic compatibility

Verify Connector O-ring and Backshell Seal O-rings on the feedback and motorbrake connectors secure cable plugs and a backshell seal on the feedback connector is necessary to achieve the maximum environmental rating Verify the seal and O-rings are installed as described

ATTENTION Unmounted motors disconnected mechanical couplings loose shaft keys and disconnected cables are dangerous if power is applied

Disassembled equipment should be appropriately identified (tagged-out) and access to electrical power restricted (locked-out)

Before applying power to the motor remove the shaft key and other mechanical couplings which could be thrown from the shaft

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force on the cable can result in the environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

Location Verify

bull An O-ring is mounted on the external surface of both the powerbrake connector and the feedback connector

bull The O-ring is undamaged not twisted and rests in the groove as shown in the illustration

bull A backshell seal covers the joint between the backshell and the connector housing

bull The backshell seal is undamaged and it is fully seated against the face of the backshell

O-ring On Both Connector Housings

Groove Reserved For Quick-lock Plug

Backshell Seal Inside Feedback Connector Housing

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 9

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Change Connector Orientation You may rotate the connector housing up to 180 degrees This lets you adjust the connector to a position that best protects the connection from possible environmental contaminates while providing cable access

The circular DIN connector housing can be rotated up to 180deg in either direction

Follow these steps to rotate a DIN connector

1 Mount and fully seat a mating cable on either the feedback or powerbrake connector

2 Grasp the mated connector and cable plug and slowly rotate them to the outside of the motor

3 Repeat these steps for the other connector

ATTENTION Connectors are designed to be rotated into a fixed position during motor installation and remain in that position without further adjustment Strictly limit the applied forces and the number of times the connector is rotated to make sure that connectors meet the requirements of IP66 and IP67

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Do not use tools such as pliers or vise-grips to assist you in rotating the connector

Only apply force to the connector Do not apply force to or pull on the cable

ATTENTION Apply force only to the motor connector and cable plug Do not apply force to the cable extending from the cable plug No tools for example pliers or vise-grips should be used to assist with the rotation of the connector

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

10 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Build and Route the Cables Knowledgeable cable routing and careful cable construction improves system performance

Build and install cables as described in these steps

1 Keep wire lengths as short as physically possible

2 Route noise sensitive wiring (encoder serial IO) away from input power and motor power wiring

3 Separate cables by 03 m (1 ft) minimum for every 9 m (30 ft) of parallel run

4 Ground both ends of the encoder cable shield and twist the signal wire pairs to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI) from other equipment

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 11

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Ground Shielded Signal Wires within a Power Cable Always connect the shield on any signal wire pair routed inside a power cable to the overall machine ground

If you are installing a 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cable loop the signal wire pairs to the overall cable shield as shown in the diagram and then clamp all the shields together in the power cable (chassis) ground connection on the drive

Grounding of Signal Wire Shields in a Power Cable

The signal wire pairs within the 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cables often carry a 24V DC brake signal but also can carry logic signals Grounding the shield that surrounds the signal wires dissipates any induced voltage and reduces the effects of EMI

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Shielded Signal Wires (two pairs) Within Power Cable

Overall Power Cable Shield

Signal Wire Shield (one of two) Contacts Overall Power Cable Shield

Factory Supplied

Field Modified

All power and signal wire shields must connect to machine ground The diagram shows one of the two signal wires in the correct position Connect both signal wire shields and the overall power cable shield to machine ground

2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx (shown) contains two signal wire pairs 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx contains one signal wire pair

12 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mount the Motor Follow these steps to mount the motor on a machine

1 Provide sufficient clearance heatsink mass and air flow for the motor so it stays within the operating temperature range of 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF)

Do not enclose the motor unless cooling air is forced across the motor and keep other heat producing devices away from the motor Heatsink requirements are listed in a footnote to the Specifications table

2 Verify the axial and radial shaft loads of your application do not exceed those listed in the Motor Load Force Ratings

3 Position the motor on the machine with its connectors pointing downward

4 Insert and hand-tighten stainless steel fasteners in each of the four mounting holes in the motor faceplate

The mounting hole diameter is specified in the Mounting Dimensions table

5 Align the motor on the machine using the mounting pilot hole to verify the correct alignment

6 Tighten the stainless steel fasteners within the recommended torque range

7 Rotate the shaft for electrical phasing and encoder alignment

The index pulse occurs on a single-turn encoder when the shaft key is aligned with the connectors Refer to Mounting Dimensions for a visual reference of this alignment

ATTENTION Outer surfaces of a motor can reach high temperatures 125 degC (275 degF) during operation

Take precautions to prevent accidental contact with hot surfaces Consider motor surface temperature when selecting connections and cables to install on a motor

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Cat No Torque Range

MPF-x310 MPF-x320 MPF-x330 10hellip136 Nbullm (90hellip120 lbbullin)

MPF-x430 MPF-x4530 MPF-x4540 215hellip283 Nbullm (190hellip250 lbbullin)

MPF-x540 452hellip565 Nbullm (400hellip500 lbbullin)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 13

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Attach Motor CablesFollow these steps to attach the feedback and powerbrake cables after the motor is mounted

1 Form a drip loop in the cable before attaching it

A drip loop creates a low spot in the cable Gravity causes any liquid to flow to the low spot and away from the connectors thereby reducing the potential for any liquid to enter the connector

2 If you use a cable with a quick-lock plug remove the O-ring on the feedback or powerbrake connector

Only threaded cable plugs require the O-ring on the connector The O-ring dampens the effects of vibration at the cable-to-motor connection and creates a more secure connection for a threaded plug O-rings interior to the cable plug provide complete environmental sealing for a cable with a quick-lock plug or a cable with a threaded plug

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the motor-to-cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force at the motor connectors can result in the connectorrsquos environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Cables requiring O-rings include power cable 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPxM4DF-xxAFxx and feedback cable 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx or 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

O-rings

Align Flat Surfaces

Feedback Plug

PowerBrake Plug

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 9

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Change Connector Orientation You may rotate the connector housing up to 180 degrees This lets you adjust the connector to a position that best protects the connection from possible environmental contaminates while providing cable access

The circular DIN connector housing can be rotated up to 180deg in either direction

Follow these steps to rotate a DIN connector

1 Mount and fully seat a mating cable on either the feedback or powerbrake connector

2 Grasp the mated connector and cable plug and slowly rotate them to the outside of the motor

3 Repeat these steps for the other connector

ATTENTION Connectors are designed to be rotated into a fixed position during motor installation and remain in that position without further adjustment Strictly limit the applied forces and the number of times the connector is rotated to make sure that connectors meet the requirements of IP66 and IP67

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Do not use tools such as pliers or vise-grips to assist you in rotating the connector

Only apply force to the connector Do not apply force to or pull on the cable

ATTENTION Apply force only to the motor connector and cable plug Do not apply force to the cable extending from the cable plug No tools for example pliers or vise-grips should be used to assist with the rotation of the connector

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

10 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Build and Route the Cables Knowledgeable cable routing and careful cable construction improves system performance

Build and install cables as described in these steps

1 Keep wire lengths as short as physically possible

2 Route noise sensitive wiring (encoder serial IO) away from input power and motor power wiring

3 Separate cables by 03 m (1 ft) minimum for every 9 m (30 ft) of parallel run

4 Ground both ends of the encoder cable shield and twist the signal wire pairs to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI) from other equipment

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 11

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Ground Shielded Signal Wires within a Power Cable Always connect the shield on any signal wire pair routed inside a power cable to the overall machine ground

If you are installing a 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cable loop the signal wire pairs to the overall cable shield as shown in the diagram and then clamp all the shields together in the power cable (chassis) ground connection on the drive

Grounding of Signal Wire Shields in a Power Cable

The signal wire pairs within the 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cables often carry a 24V DC brake signal but also can carry logic signals Grounding the shield that surrounds the signal wires dissipates any induced voltage and reduces the effects of EMI

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Shielded Signal Wires (two pairs) Within Power Cable

Overall Power Cable Shield

Signal Wire Shield (one of two) Contacts Overall Power Cable Shield

Factory Supplied

Field Modified

All power and signal wire shields must connect to machine ground The diagram shows one of the two signal wires in the correct position Connect both signal wire shields and the overall power cable shield to machine ground

2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx (shown) contains two signal wire pairs 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx contains one signal wire pair

12 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mount the Motor Follow these steps to mount the motor on a machine

1 Provide sufficient clearance heatsink mass and air flow for the motor so it stays within the operating temperature range of 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF)

Do not enclose the motor unless cooling air is forced across the motor and keep other heat producing devices away from the motor Heatsink requirements are listed in a footnote to the Specifications table

2 Verify the axial and radial shaft loads of your application do not exceed those listed in the Motor Load Force Ratings

3 Position the motor on the machine with its connectors pointing downward

4 Insert and hand-tighten stainless steel fasteners in each of the four mounting holes in the motor faceplate

The mounting hole diameter is specified in the Mounting Dimensions table

5 Align the motor on the machine using the mounting pilot hole to verify the correct alignment

6 Tighten the stainless steel fasteners within the recommended torque range

7 Rotate the shaft for electrical phasing and encoder alignment

The index pulse occurs on a single-turn encoder when the shaft key is aligned with the connectors Refer to Mounting Dimensions for a visual reference of this alignment

ATTENTION Outer surfaces of a motor can reach high temperatures 125 degC (275 degF) during operation

Take precautions to prevent accidental contact with hot surfaces Consider motor surface temperature when selecting connections and cables to install on a motor

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Cat No Torque Range

MPF-x310 MPF-x320 MPF-x330 10hellip136 Nbullm (90hellip120 lbbullin)

MPF-x430 MPF-x4530 MPF-x4540 215hellip283 Nbullm (190hellip250 lbbullin)

MPF-x540 452hellip565 Nbullm (400hellip500 lbbullin)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 13

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Attach Motor CablesFollow these steps to attach the feedback and powerbrake cables after the motor is mounted

1 Form a drip loop in the cable before attaching it

A drip loop creates a low spot in the cable Gravity causes any liquid to flow to the low spot and away from the connectors thereby reducing the potential for any liquid to enter the connector

2 If you use a cable with a quick-lock plug remove the O-ring on the feedback or powerbrake connector

Only threaded cable plugs require the O-ring on the connector The O-ring dampens the effects of vibration at the cable-to-motor connection and creates a more secure connection for a threaded plug O-rings interior to the cable plug provide complete environmental sealing for a cable with a quick-lock plug or a cable with a threaded plug

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the motor-to-cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force at the motor connectors can result in the connectorrsquos environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Cables requiring O-rings include power cable 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPxM4DF-xxAFxx and feedback cable 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx or 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

O-rings

Align Flat Surfaces

Feedback Plug

PowerBrake Plug

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

10 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Build and Route the Cables Knowledgeable cable routing and careful cable construction improves system performance

Build and install cables as described in these steps

1 Keep wire lengths as short as physically possible

2 Route noise sensitive wiring (encoder serial IO) away from input power and motor power wiring

3 Separate cables by 03 m (1 ft) minimum for every 9 m (30 ft) of parallel run

4 Ground both ends of the encoder cable shield and twist the signal wire pairs to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI) from other equipment

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 11

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Ground Shielded Signal Wires within a Power Cable Always connect the shield on any signal wire pair routed inside a power cable to the overall machine ground

If you are installing a 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cable loop the signal wire pairs to the overall cable shield as shown in the diagram and then clamp all the shields together in the power cable (chassis) ground connection on the drive

Grounding of Signal Wire Shields in a Power Cable

The signal wire pairs within the 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cables often carry a 24V DC brake signal but also can carry logic signals Grounding the shield that surrounds the signal wires dissipates any induced voltage and reduces the effects of EMI

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Shielded Signal Wires (two pairs) Within Power Cable

Overall Power Cable Shield

Signal Wire Shield (one of two) Contacts Overall Power Cable Shield

Factory Supplied

Field Modified

All power and signal wire shields must connect to machine ground The diagram shows one of the two signal wires in the correct position Connect both signal wire shields and the overall power cable shield to machine ground

2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx (shown) contains two signal wire pairs 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx contains one signal wire pair

12 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mount the Motor Follow these steps to mount the motor on a machine

1 Provide sufficient clearance heatsink mass and air flow for the motor so it stays within the operating temperature range of 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF)

Do not enclose the motor unless cooling air is forced across the motor and keep other heat producing devices away from the motor Heatsink requirements are listed in a footnote to the Specifications table

2 Verify the axial and radial shaft loads of your application do not exceed those listed in the Motor Load Force Ratings

3 Position the motor on the machine with its connectors pointing downward

4 Insert and hand-tighten stainless steel fasteners in each of the four mounting holes in the motor faceplate

The mounting hole diameter is specified in the Mounting Dimensions table

5 Align the motor on the machine using the mounting pilot hole to verify the correct alignment

6 Tighten the stainless steel fasteners within the recommended torque range

7 Rotate the shaft for electrical phasing and encoder alignment

The index pulse occurs on a single-turn encoder when the shaft key is aligned with the connectors Refer to Mounting Dimensions for a visual reference of this alignment

ATTENTION Outer surfaces of a motor can reach high temperatures 125 degC (275 degF) during operation

Take precautions to prevent accidental contact with hot surfaces Consider motor surface temperature when selecting connections and cables to install on a motor

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Cat No Torque Range

MPF-x310 MPF-x320 MPF-x330 10hellip136 Nbullm (90hellip120 lbbullin)

MPF-x430 MPF-x4530 MPF-x4540 215hellip283 Nbullm (190hellip250 lbbullin)

MPF-x540 452hellip565 Nbullm (400hellip500 lbbullin)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 13

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Attach Motor CablesFollow these steps to attach the feedback and powerbrake cables after the motor is mounted

1 Form a drip loop in the cable before attaching it

A drip loop creates a low spot in the cable Gravity causes any liquid to flow to the low spot and away from the connectors thereby reducing the potential for any liquid to enter the connector

2 If you use a cable with a quick-lock plug remove the O-ring on the feedback or powerbrake connector

Only threaded cable plugs require the O-ring on the connector The O-ring dampens the effects of vibration at the cable-to-motor connection and creates a more secure connection for a threaded plug O-rings interior to the cable plug provide complete environmental sealing for a cable with a quick-lock plug or a cable with a threaded plug

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the motor-to-cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force at the motor connectors can result in the connectorrsquos environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Cables requiring O-rings include power cable 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPxM4DF-xxAFxx and feedback cable 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx or 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

O-rings

Align Flat Surfaces

Feedback Plug

PowerBrake Plug

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 11

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Ground Shielded Signal Wires within a Power Cable Always connect the shield on any signal wire pair routed inside a power cable to the overall machine ground

If you are installing a 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cable loop the signal wire pairs to the overall cable shield as shown in the diagram and then clamp all the shields together in the power cable (chassis) ground connection on the drive

Grounding of Signal Wire Shields in a Power Cable

The signal wire pairs within the 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx power cables often carry a 24V DC brake signal but also can carry logic signals Grounding the shield that surrounds the signal wires dissipates any induced voltage and reduces the effects of EMI

ATTENTION If any shield on a power cable is not grounded high voltage can be present on that shield

Make sure there is a connection to ground for all shield wires inside a power cable and for the overall power cable shield

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Shielded Signal Wires (two pairs) Within Power Cable

Overall Power Cable Shield

Signal Wire Shield (one of two) Contacts Overall Power Cable Shield

Factory Supplied

Field Modified

All power and signal wire shields must connect to machine ground The diagram shows one of the two signal wires in the correct position Connect both signal wire shields and the overall power cable shield to machine ground

2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx (shown) contains two signal wire pairs 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx contains one signal wire pair

12 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mount the Motor Follow these steps to mount the motor on a machine

1 Provide sufficient clearance heatsink mass and air flow for the motor so it stays within the operating temperature range of 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF)

Do not enclose the motor unless cooling air is forced across the motor and keep other heat producing devices away from the motor Heatsink requirements are listed in a footnote to the Specifications table

2 Verify the axial and radial shaft loads of your application do not exceed those listed in the Motor Load Force Ratings

3 Position the motor on the machine with its connectors pointing downward

4 Insert and hand-tighten stainless steel fasteners in each of the four mounting holes in the motor faceplate

The mounting hole diameter is specified in the Mounting Dimensions table

5 Align the motor on the machine using the mounting pilot hole to verify the correct alignment

6 Tighten the stainless steel fasteners within the recommended torque range

7 Rotate the shaft for electrical phasing and encoder alignment

The index pulse occurs on a single-turn encoder when the shaft key is aligned with the connectors Refer to Mounting Dimensions for a visual reference of this alignment

ATTENTION Outer surfaces of a motor can reach high temperatures 125 degC (275 degF) during operation

Take precautions to prevent accidental contact with hot surfaces Consider motor surface temperature when selecting connections and cables to install on a motor

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Cat No Torque Range

MPF-x310 MPF-x320 MPF-x330 10hellip136 Nbullm (90hellip120 lbbullin)

MPF-x430 MPF-x4530 MPF-x4540 215hellip283 Nbullm (190hellip250 lbbullin)

MPF-x540 452hellip565 Nbullm (400hellip500 lbbullin)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 13

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Attach Motor CablesFollow these steps to attach the feedback and powerbrake cables after the motor is mounted

1 Form a drip loop in the cable before attaching it

A drip loop creates a low spot in the cable Gravity causes any liquid to flow to the low spot and away from the connectors thereby reducing the potential for any liquid to enter the connector

2 If you use a cable with a quick-lock plug remove the O-ring on the feedback or powerbrake connector

Only threaded cable plugs require the O-ring on the connector The O-ring dampens the effects of vibration at the cable-to-motor connection and creates a more secure connection for a threaded plug O-rings interior to the cable plug provide complete environmental sealing for a cable with a quick-lock plug or a cable with a threaded plug

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the motor-to-cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force at the motor connectors can result in the connectorrsquos environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Cables requiring O-rings include power cable 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPxM4DF-xxAFxx and feedback cable 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx or 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

O-rings

Align Flat Surfaces

Feedback Plug

PowerBrake Plug

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

12 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mount the Motor Follow these steps to mount the motor on a machine

1 Provide sufficient clearance heatsink mass and air flow for the motor so it stays within the operating temperature range of 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF)

Do not enclose the motor unless cooling air is forced across the motor and keep other heat producing devices away from the motor Heatsink requirements are listed in a footnote to the Specifications table

2 Verify the axial and radial shaft loads of your application do not exceed those listed in the Motor Load Force Ratings

3 Position the motor on the machine with its connectors pointing downward

4 Insert and hand-tighten stainless steel fasteners in each of the four mounting holes in the motor faceplate

The mounting hole diameter is specified in the Mounting Dimensions table

5 Align the motor on the machine using the mounting pilot hole to verify the correct alignment

6 Tighten the stainless steel fasteners within the recommended torque range

7 Rotate the shaft for electrical phasing and encoder alignment

The index pulse occurs on a single-turn encoder when the shaft key is aligned with the connectors Refer to Mounting Dimensions for a visual reference of this alignment

ATTENTION Outer surfaces of a motor can reach high temperatures 125 degC (275 degF) during operation

Take precautions to prevent accidental contact with hot surfaces Consider motor surface temperature when selecting connections and cables to install on a motor

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

Cat No Torque Range

MPF-x310 MPF-x320 MPF-x330 10hellip136 Nbullm (90hellip120 lbbullin)

MPF-x430 MPF-x4530 MPF-x4540 215hellip283 Nbullm (190hellip250 lbbullin)

MPF-x540 452hellip565 Nbullm (400hellip500 lbbullin)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 13

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Attach Motor CablesFollow these steps to attach the feedback and powerbrake cables after the motor is mounted

1 Form a drip loop in the cable before attaching it

A drip loop creates a low spot in the cable Gravity causes any liquid to flow to the low spot and away from the connectors thereby reducing the potential for any liquid to enter the connector

2 If you use a cable with a quick-lock plug remove the O-ring on the feedback or powerbrake connector

Only threaded cable plugs require the O-ring on the connector The O-ring dampens the effects of vibration at the cable-to-motor connection and creates a more secure connection for a threaded plug O-rings interior to the cable plug provide complete environmental sealing for a cable with a quick-lock plug or a cable with a threaded plug

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the motor-to-cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force at the motor connectors can result in the connectorrsquos environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Cables requiring O-rings include power cable 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPxM4DF-xxAFxx and feedback cable 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx or 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

O-rings

Align Flat Surfaces

Feedback Plug

PowerBrake Plug

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 13

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Attach Motor CablesFollow these steps to attach the feedback and powerbrake cables after the motor is mounted

1 Form a drip loop in the cable before attaching it

A drip loop creates a low spot in the cable Gravity causes any liquid to flow to the low spot and away from the connectors thereby reducing the potential for any liquid to enter the connector

2 If you use a cable with a quick-lock plug remove the O-ring on the feedback or powerbrake connector

Only threaded cable plugs require the O-ring on the connector The O-ring dampens the effects of vibration at the cable-to-motor connection and creates a more secure connection for a threaded plug O-rings interior to the cable plug provide complete environmental sealing for a cable with a quick-lock plug or a cable with a threaded plug

ATTENTION Make sure that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven tension or flexing at the motor-to-cable connections

Excessive and uneven lateral force at the motor connectors can result in the connectorrsquos environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

IMPORTANT Cables requiring O-rings include power cable 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx or 2090-CPxM4DF-xxAFxx and feedback cable 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx or 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

O-rings

Align Flat Surfaces

Feedback Plug

PowerBrake Plug

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

14 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

3 Carefully align the flat surface on the feedback or the powerbrake cable plug (shown in the diagram) with the flat surface on the motor connector

4 Hand tighten the collar on the plug to fully seat it on the connector

bull Threaded plug requires five to six revolutions

bull Quick-lock plug requires approximately one-quarter of a revolution

Do not apply excessive force when mating the cable plug with the motor connector If the plug and connector do not go together with light hand force realign the flat surfaces and try again

IMPORTANT The motor orientation shown is used to clearly show the alignment marker on each cable socket

The recommended motor orientation when installed positions the connectors at the bottom of the motor

ATTENTION Keyed connectors and cable plugs must properly align and be hand-tightened the recommended number of turns

Improper alignment is indicated by the need for excessive force such as the use of tools to fully seat a plug

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and cable and their components

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 15

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Connector Data These tables identify pinouts for the feedback and the power with brake connectors

M23 Feedback Connector M23 Power with Brake Connector

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx

Pin

MPF-A3xxhellipMPF-A45xx and MPF-B3xxhellipMPF-B45xxx

1 Sin+ A Phase U (1)

(1) Power pins A B C and D may be labelled U V W and GND respectively Brake pins F and G may be labelled as + and - (positive and negative) respectively Reserved pins E and H may be numbered 1 and 2

2 Sin- B Phase V (1)

3 Cos+ C Phase W (1)

4 Cos- D Ground (1)

5 Data+ E Reserved (1)

6 Data- F MBRK+ (1)

7 Reserved G MBRK- (1)

8 H Reserved (1)

9 +5V DC L

10 Common

11 Reserved

12

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M23 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

B C

AG

L

F

E

H

D

Intercontec PN BEDC090NN00000017000

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

16 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

M23 Feedback Connector M40 Power with Brake Connector

Pin MPF-Bxxx (460V) and MPF-A5xx Pin MPF-A5xx and MPF-B5xx

1 Sin+ U Phase U

2 Sin- V Phase V

3 Cos+ W Phase W

4 Cos- Ground

5 Data+ + BR+

6 Data- - BR-

7 Reserved 1 Reserved

8 2

9

10

11 +9V DC

12 Common

13 TS+

14 TS-

15 Reserved

16

17

M23 Feedback Connector M40 PowerBrake Connector

1

2

3

45

67

8

9

10

1112

13

1417

15

16

Intercontec PN AEDC227NN00000012000

V

UW

12

+-

Intercontec PN CEDE271NN00000051000

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 17

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Mounting Dimensions

The dimensions in the table are for non-brake motors Footnotes provide tolerances for the common dimensions and the additional dimensions specific to brake motors or features on specific motors

S M

AD

HD

L

P

GE

LA

LB

T

L-LB

D

LE

N

LD

ADHD

F

MPF

-x3x

x =

5 x

5 x

25M

PF-x

4xx

= 6

x 6

x 25

MPF

-x45

xx =

8 x

7 x

32

MPF

-x54

0 =

8 x

7 x

40

MPF

-x3x

x M

PF-x

4xx

and

M

PF-x

45xx

mot

ors

MPF

-x54

0 m

otor

s

131

0 (5

16)

(MPF

-x54

0) o

nly

AB AB

(Pilo

t Dia

met

er)

Shaf

t End

Hol

eTh

read

and

Dep

th

Shaf

t Key

MPF

-x54

0 En

d Ca

pM

23 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

is

sta

ndar

d on

the

Elec

troni

c ze

ro (I

ndex

pul

se o

r Ste

gman

n AB

S =

0) o

ccur

s w

hen

the

shaf

t key

or d

impl

e (n

ot s

how

n) is

alig

ned

with

the

conn

ecto

rs (a

s sh

own)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or D

imen

sion

s

(MPF

-x54

0-xx

7xxx

mot

ors)

(D

iam

eter

of H

oles

)

(Dia

met

er o

f Bol

t Circ

le)

M40

Pow

erB

rake

Con

nect

or

is s

tand

ard

only

on

the

Dim

ensi

on is

to th

e fro

nt o

f the

M

40 P

ower

Bra

ke C

onne

ctor

M23

Fee

dbac

k Co

nnec

tor

is s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

PF m

otor

s

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

18 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

MP-Series Food Grade motors are designed to metric dimensions Inch dimensions are mathematical conversions

MotorSeriesMPF-A or MPF-B

ABmm (in)

AD mm (in)

D (2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0008 -0003 mm (+00011 -00008 in) MPF-x4xx and MPF-x45xx +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in) MPF-x540 +0009 -0004 mm (+00003 -00002 in)

F (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and -x4xx -003 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x45xx -004 mm (-0001 in) MPF-x540 -0036 mm (-00015 in)

GE (4) mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

HDmm (in)

L (5) (6) mm (in)

(5) If ordering an MPF-xxxx motor with a brake add 345 mm (136 in) to MPF-x310 MPF-x320 or MPF-x330 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x430 dimensions L LB LD and LE 485 mm (191 in) to MPF-x4530 or MPF-x4540 dimensions L LB LD and 486 mm (191 in) to LE and 516 mm (203 in) to MPF-x540 dimensions L LB LD and LE

(6) Tolerance for this dimension is plusmn07 mm (plusmn028 in)

L-LB (6)

mm (in)

LAmm (in)

310 675 (266)

8725 (343)

160 (0629)

50 (0197)

30 (0118)

1334 (525)

1680 (662)

400 (157)

991 (039)

320 1930 (762)

330 2190 (862)

430 691 (272)

909 (358)

190 (0748)

60 (0236)

35 (0138)

1428 (559)

2150 (848)

400 (157)

1016 (04)

4530 691 (272)

986 (388)

240 (0945)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

1576 (620)

2290 (90)

500 (197)

1219 (048)

4540 2540 (100)

540 726 (286)

1364 (1)

(537)

(1) This measurement is to the top of the M40 power connector The measurement to the top of the M23 feedback connector is 836 mm (447 in)

280 (1102)

80 (0315)

40 (0158)

2090 (823)

2260 (928)

600 (236)

1397 (055)

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 19

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

LB (1) mm (in)

(1) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx and MPF-x4xx +01 mm (+0004 in) MPF-x45xx and MPF-x540 +02 mm (+0007 in)

LD (1) mm (in)

LE (1) mm (in)

M(2) mm (in)

(2) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

N (3) mm (in)

(3) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx +0012 -0007 mm (+00001 -00007 in) MPF-x4xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in) MPF-x45xx +0013 -0009 mm (+00002 -00007 in) and MPF-x540 +0014 -0009 mm (+00007 -00002 in)

P mm (in)

S (4)

mm (in)

(4) Tolerance for this dimension is MPF-x3xx MPF-x4xx or MPF-x45xx +036 mm (plusmn0007 in) and MPF-x540 +043 mm (plusmn0008 in)

T mm (in)

Shaft End Threaded Hole mm (in)

1280 (504)

1020 (403)

620 (245)

1000 (394)

800 (315)

9239 (364)

70 (0283)

274 (011)

M5 x 08 - 6H Thread depth 125 (049)

1530 (604)

1280 (503)

880 (345)

1790 (704)

1530 (603)

1130 (445)

1750 (690)

1490 (589)

1100 (431)

1150 (453)

950 (374)

1021 (402)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M6 x 10 - 6H Thread depth 16 (063)

1790 (703)

1530 (602)

1130 (444)

1300 (512)

1100 (4331)

1181 (465)

100 (0401)

274 (011)

M8 x 125 - 6H Thread depth 19 (075)

2040 (803)

1783 (702)

1380 (544)

1760 (692)

1510 (595)

1618 (637)

1650 (650)

1300 (5118)

1453 (572)

120 (0481)

312 (012)

M10 x 15 - 6H Thread depth 22 (087)

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

20 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Motor Load Force Ratings Motors are capable of operating with a sustained shaft load The load force locations are shown in the figure and maximum values are in the tables

Loads are measured in kilograms pounds are mathematical conversions

Load Forces on Shaft

The following tables represent 20000 hour L10 bearing fatigue life at various loads and speeds This 20000 hour life does not account for possible application-specific life reduction that can occur due to bearing grease contamination from external sources

Radial Load Force Ratings

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 62 (137) 49(108) mdash 40 (88) mdash 36 (79)

MPF-AB320 87 (192) 69 (152) 55 (121) mdash 45 (99) mdash 40 (88)

MPF-AB330 mdash 74 (163) 59 (130) mdash 49 (108) mdash 43 (95)

MPF-AB430 106 (234) 84 (185) 67 (148) mdash 55 (121) mdash 49 (108)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 105 (231) 84 (185) 73 (161) mdash 66 (146) mdash

MPF-AB4540 140 (309) 111 (245) 89 (196) 77 (170) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 143 (315) 114 (251) 99 (218) mdash 90 (198) mdash

Axial Load Force

Radial load force applied at center of shaft extension

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 21

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Axial Load Force Ratings (Maximum Radial Load)

Axial Load Force Ratings (Zero Radial Load)

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 23 (51) 16 (35) mdash 13 29) mdash 11 (24)

MPF-AB320 34 (75) 25 (55) 19 (42) mdash 15 (33) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB330 mdash 27 (60) 20 (44) mdash 16 (35) mdash 13 (29)

MPF-AB430 52 (115) 39 (86) 29 (64) mdash 22 (49) mdash 19 (42)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 34 (75) 25 (55) 21 (46) mdash 19 (42) mdash

MPF-AB4540 49 (108) 36 (79) 27 (60) 22 (49) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 49 (108) 36 (79) 30 (66) mdash 26 (57) mdash

Motor500 rpmkg (lb)

1000 rpmkg (lb)

2000 rpmkg (lb)

3000 rpmkg (lb)

3500 rpmkg (lb)

4000 rpmkg (lb)

5000 rpmkg (lb)

MPF-AB310 mdash 36 (79) 27 (60) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB320 49 (108) 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB330 mdash 36 (80) 27 (59) mdash 21 (46) mdash 18 (40)

MPF-AB430 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) mdash 30 (66) mdash 25 (55)

MPF-AB4530 mdash 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash 28 (62) mdash

MPF-AB4540 69 (152) 51 (112) 38 (84) 31 (69) mdash mdash mdash

MPF-AB540 mdash 68 (150) 49 (108) 42 (93) mdash 37 (82) mdash

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

22 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Accessory Kits Factory available accessories for MP-Series Food Grade motors are described below

Motor Cables Factory manufactured feedback and power cables are available in standard cable lengths They provide environmental sealing for IP66 and IP67 ratings and proper shield termination For a complete listing of available cables refer to your drive manual contact your nearest Rockwell Automation sales office or access the information from the references in Additional Resources

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001 for information on feedback power and brake cables or connector kits

Shaft SealsA shaft seal provides a barrier to moisture and particle entering the motor bearings

Motors are shipped with a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) shaft seal installed Catalog numbers and dimensions for replacement shaft seals are listed in the table

Refer to the Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012 for instructions on how to install a shaft seal

Motor Cat No Inside Diametermm (in)

Outside Diametermm (in)

Width mm (in)

MPF-A310 -A320 -A330 -B310 -B320 and -B330

MPF-SST-A3B3 23 (090) 47 (185) 6 (024)

MPF-A430 and -B430

MPF-SST-A4B4 26 (102) 52 (205) 6 (024)

MPF-A4530 -A4540 -B4530 and -B4540

MPF-SST-A45B45 31 (122) 62 (244) 7 (027)

MPF-A540 and -B540

MPF-SST-F165 36 (142) 72 (284) 7 (027)

IMPORTANT Shaft seals must be lubricated using a food grade polyurea base grease such as Chevron FM (NLGI 2) Lubricated shaft seals are typically replaced at 12 month intervals Lubricant is supplied with shaft seal kits

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 23

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Shaft KeyShaft keys are constructed of 300-series stainless steel The specified tolerance provides an interference fit (slightly larger than the opening) for a secure and rigid connection

Follow these steps to install a shaft key

1 Remove the shaft key if present using one of these methods

bull Lift the key by grasping it with a plier or similar tool

bull Lever the key with a flat blade screwdriver inserted between the key and the bottom of the slot

2 Install a shaft key by performing this procedure

a Verify the replacement key matches the keyway in the shaft and the mating mechanical connection (coupling or pulley)

b Align the front of the key with the front of the motor shaft This prevents interference with the key by the end-of-cut radius

c Support the underside of the shaft with a fixture and use a device to apply a controlled force that presses the key into the keyway

ATTENTION Damage can occur to the motor bearings and the feedback device if sharp impact is applied to the shaft during installation of couplings and pulleys or a shaft key Damage to the feedback device can result by applying leverage from the motor mounting face to remove devices mounted on the motor shaft

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the motor and its components

Radius Cut at the End of the Keyway

Key Aligns at End of Shaft

Support Fixture for

Shaft

Apply a constant force evenly across the top of the key

24 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Sealing Air Pressure KitA sealing air pressure kit (catalog number MPF-7-AIR-PURGE) is available for field installation on an M23 feedback connector Positive air pressure supplied through this kit provides an additional level of protection for the motor against the ingress of foreign substances and moisture

The kit replaces the M23 feedback connector cap provides a replacement O-ring and includes installation instructions

When designing you motion system consider the following guidelines when installing a sealing air pressure kit

bull Plastic air tubing should be 4 mm (532 in) OD Teflon FEP tubing

bull Air supplied to the motor should not exceed 01 bar (145 psi)

Air Kit Installation on the M23 Feedback Connector

ATTENTION Excessive air pressure and improper filtering of air can result in damage to the motor

Air supplied to the motor must be clean dry and of instrument quality Maximum air pressure should be 01 bar (145 psi)

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

O-ring

Air Fitting

Torx Screw M3 x 10mm

Flat Head

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 25

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Specifications Attribute Value

Temperature operating 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF) (3)

(3) To obtain this thermal rating mount the motor on a surface with heat dissipation equivalent to a 3048 x 3048 x 127 mm (12 x 12 x 05 in) aluminum heatsink

Temperature storage -30hellip70 degC (-22hellip158 degF)

Relative humidity storage 5hellip95 non-condensing

Atmosphere storage non-corrosive

IP Rating (1) Motor with a shaft seal installed (2) Motor without a shaft seal and mounted in this direction bull shaft down bull shaft horizontal bull shaft up

(1) The motors are dual rated with International Protection Codes (IP Ratings) for environmental protection The motor rating excludes any reduction in the rating resulting from cables or their plugs

(2) Refer to Shaft Seals for the recommended replacement interval and installation instructions

IP67 - dust tight temporary immersion (4) IP66 - dust tight powerful water jets (4) (5) IP53 - dust protected water spray plusmn 60ordm from vertical IP51 - dust protected water dripping vertically IP50 - dust protected no protection from water

(4) The following are the IPx5 and IPx6 water spray test conditions bull General conditions are three minutes of operation at all angles from a distance of 25hellip30 m (98hellip118 in) bull IPx5 spray conditions are 125 liters per minute (33 gpm) through a 63 mm (025 in) nozzle with ~03 bar (435 psi) at the nozzle bull IPx6 spray conditions are 100 liters per minute (264 gpm) through a 125 mm (05 in) nozzle with ~1 bar (145 psi) at the nozzle bull The spray is water at room temperature Chemical or cleaning solutions are excluded

(5) International Protection Code (IP66) is roughly equivalent to a NEMA 35 (dust tight drip tight)

26 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative

Resource Description

MP-Series Brushless Servo Motor Installation Instructions publication MP-IN002 MP-IN001 or MP-IN006

Information on installing small frame (lt75 mm) medium frame (100hellip165 mm) or large frame (gt215 mm) MP-Series low-inertia motors

Ultra5000 IPD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra5000 drive

Ultra3000 DSD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN003

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra3000 drive

Kinetix 2000 Multi-axis Servo Drive User Manual publication 2093-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 2000 drive

Kinetix 6000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual publication 2094-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 6000 drive

Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012

Information on selecting and installing a shaft seal on a servo motor

Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG-71

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations

System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual publication GMC-RM001

Information examples and techniques designed to minimize system failures caused by electrical noise

Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001

Specifications motorservo-drive system combinations and accessories for Kinetix motion control products

24 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Sealing Air Pressure KitA sealing air pressure kit (catalog number MPF-7-AIR-PURGE) is available for field installation on an M23 feedback connector Positive air pressure supplied through this kit provides an additional level of protection for the motor against the ingress of foreign substances and moisture

The kit replaces the M23 feedback connector cap provides a replacement O-ring and includes installation instructions

When designing you motion system consider the following guidelines when installing a sealing air pressure kit

bull Plastic air tubing should be 4 mm (532 in) OD Teflon FEP tubing

bull Air supplied to the motor should not exceed 01 bar (145 psi)

Air Kit Installation on the M23 Feedback Connector

ATTENTION Excessive air pressure and improper filtering of air can result in damage to the motor

Air supplied to the motor must be clean dry and of instrument quality Maximum air pressure should be 01 bar (145 psi)

Failure to observe safety precautions could result in personal injury or damage to equipment

O-ring

Air Fitting

Torx Screw M3 x 10mm

Flat Head

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 25

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Specifications Attribute Value

Temperature operating 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF) (3)

(3) To obtain this thermal rating mount the motor on a surface with heat dissipation equivalent to a 3048 x 3048 x 127 mm (12 x 12 x 05 in) aluminum heatsink

Temperature storage -30hellip70 degC (-22hellip158 degF)

Relative humidity storage 5hellip95 non-condensing

Atmosphere storage non-corrosive

IP Rating (1) Motor with a shaft seal installed (2) Motor without a shaft seal and mounted in this direction bull shaft down bull shaft horizontal bull shaft up

(1) The motors are dual rated with International Protection Codes (IP Ratings) for environmental protection The motor rating excludes any reduction in the rating resulting from cables or their plugs

(2) Refer to Shaft Seals for the recommended replacement interval and installation instructions

IP67 - dust tight temporary immersion (4) IP66 - dust tight powerful water jets (4) (5) IP53 - dust protected water spray plusmn 60ordm from vertical IP51 - dust protected water dripping vertically IP50 - dust protected no protection from water

(4) The following are the IPx5 and IPx6 water spray test conditions bull General conditions are three minutes of operation at all angles from a distance of 25hellip30 m (98hellip118 in) bull IPx5 spray conditions are 125 liters per minute (33 gpm) through a 63 mm (025 in) nozzle with ~03 bar (435 psi) at the nozzle bull IPx6 spray conditions are 100 liters per minute (264 gpm) through a 125 mm (05 in) nozzle with ~1 bar (145 psi) at the nozzle bull The spray is water at room temperature Chemical or cleaning solutions are excluded

(5) International Protection Code (IP66) is roughly equivalent to a NEMA 35 (dust tight drip tight)

26 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative

Resource Description

MP-Series Brushless Servo Motor Installation Instructions publication MP-IN002 MP-IN001 or MP-IN006

Information on installing small frame (lt75 mm) medium frame (100hellip165 mm) or large frame (gt215 mm) MP-Series low-inertia motors

Ultra5000 IPD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra5000 drive

Ultra3000 DSD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN003

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra3000 drive

Kinetix 2000 Multi-axis Servo Drive User Manual publication 2093-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 2000 drive

Kinetix 6000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual publication 2094-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 6000 drive

Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012

Information on selecting and installing a shaft seal on a servo motor

Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG-71

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations

System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual publication GMC-RM001

Information examples and techniques designed to minimize system failures caused by electrical noise

Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001

Specifications motorservo-drive system combinations and accessories for Kinetix motion control products

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 25

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Specifications Attribute Value

Temperature operating 0hellip40 degC (32hellip104 degF) (3)

(3) To obtain this thermal rating mount the motor on a surface with heat dissipation equivalent to a 3048 x 3048 x 127 mm (12 x 12 x 05 in) aluminum heatsink

Temperature storage -30hellip70 degC (-22hellip158 degF)

Relative humidity storage 5hellip95 non-condensing

Atmosphere storage non-corrosive

IP Rating (1) Motor with a shaft seal installed (2) Motor without a shaft seal and mounted in this direction bull shaft down bull shaft horizontal bull shaft up

(1) The motors are dual rated with International Protection Codes (IP Ratings) for environmental protection The motor rating excludes any reduction in the rating resulting from cables or their plugs

(2) Refer to Shaft Seals for the recommended replacement interval and installation instructions

IP67 - dust tight temporary immersion (4) IP66 - dust tight powerful water jets (4) (5) IP53 - dust protected water spray plusmn 60ordm from vertical IP51 - dust protected water dripping vertically IP50 - dust protected no protection from water

(4) The following are the IPx5 and IPx6 water spray test conditions bull General conditions are three minutes of operation at all angles from a distance of 25hellip30 m (98hellip118 in) bull IPx5 spray conditions are 125 liters per minute (33 gpm) through a 63 mm (025 in) nozzle with ~03 bar (435 psi) at the nozzle bull IPx6 spray conditions are 100 liters per minute (264 gpm) through a 125 mm (05 in) nozzle with ~1 bar (145 psi) at the nozzle bull The spray is water at room temperature Chemical or cleaning solutions are excluded

(5) International Protection Code (IP66) is roughly equivalent to a NEMA 35 (dust tight drip tight)

26 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative

Resource Description

MP-Series Brushless Servo Motor Installation Instructions publication MP-IN002 MP-IN001 or MP-IN006

Information on installing small frame (lt75 mm) medium frame (100hellip165 mm) or large frame (gt215 mm) MP-Series low-inertia motors

Ultra5000 IPD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra5000 drive

Ultra3000 DSD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN003

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra3000 drive

Kinetix 2000 Multi-axis Servo Drive User Manual publication 2093-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 2000 drive

Kinetix 6000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual publication 2094-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 6000 drive

Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012

Information on selecting and installing a shaft seal on a servo motor

Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG-71

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations

System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual publication GMC-RM001

Information examples and techniques designed to minimize system failures caused by electrical noise

Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001

Specifications motorservo-drive system combinations and accessories for Kinetix motion control products

26 MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative

Resource Description

MP-Series Brushless Servo Motor Installation Instructions publication MP-IN002 MP-IN001 or MP-IN006

Information on installing small frame (lt75 mm) medium frame (100hellip165 mm) or large frame (gt215 mm) MP-Series low-inertia motors

Ultra5000 IPD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra5000 drive

Ultra3000 DSD Installation Instructions publication 2098-IN003

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with an Ultra3000 drive

Kinetix 2000 Multi-axis Servo Drive User Manual publication 2093-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 2000 drive

Kinetix 6000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual publication 2094-UM001

Information on installing configuring startup and troubleshooting a servo drive system with a Kinetix 6000 drive

Shaft-seal Kit Installation Instructions publication 2090-IN012

Information on selecting and installing a shaft seal on a servo motor

Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG-71

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations

System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual publication GMC-RM001

Information examples and techniques designed to minimize system failures caused by electrical noise

Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide publication GMC-SG001

Specifications motorservo-drive system combinations and accessories for Kinetix motion control products

MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor Installation Instructions 27

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009

Notes

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009 PN-37429Supersedes Publication MP-IN004C-EN-P mdash July 2004 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Allen-Bradley Kinetix Rockwell Automation MP-Series and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies

United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

Publication MP-IN004D-EN-P mdash April 2009 PN-37429Supersedes Publication MP-IN004C-EN-P mdash July 2004 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Allen-Bradley Kinetix Rockwell Automation MP-Series and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies

United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

Intro

Generic pub print specs

ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers

ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

100

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SIDE

NA

NA

NA

NA

50

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

NA

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

GLOSS TEXT

80

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

825

11

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

5

B

PERFECT

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

2

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

85

11

NA

14

3LEFT

LEFT

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

MP-IN004D-EN-P April 2009

Installation Instructions MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor with100 mm to 165 mm Frame Size

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

19066

04082009

5

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

4

28

7

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

55

85

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

HALF

55 x 85

50

RRD must provide this information

CoverText 20 White Opaque Bond

PN-37429

Corp

17501

Bill To

69

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
	This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs		Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs		Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs		Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs		Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs		Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions		Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
	Attach Print Specs to PDF
	For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet

Generic pub print specs

ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers

ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

100

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SIDE

NA

NA

NA

NA

50

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

NA

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

GLOSS TEXT

80

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

825

11

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

5

B

PERFECT

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

2

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

85

11

NA

14

3LEFT

LEFT

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

MP-IN004D-EN-P April 2009

Installation Instructions MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor with100 mm to 165 mm Frame Size

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

19066

04082009

5

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

4

28

7

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

55

85

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

HALF

55 x 85

50

RRD must provide this information

CoverText 20 White Opaque Bond

PN-37429

Corp

17501

Bill To

69

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

100

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SIDE

NA

NA

NA

NA

50

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

NA

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

GLOSS TEXT

80

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

825

11

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

5

B

PERFECT

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

2

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

85

11

NA

14

3LEFT

LEFT

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

MP-IN004D-EN-P April 2009

Installation Instructions MP-Series Food Grade Servo Motor with100 mm to 165 mm Frame Size

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

19066

04082009

5

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

4

28

7

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

55

85

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

HALF

55 x 85

50

RRD must provide this information

CoverText 20 White Opaque Bond

PN-37429

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

100

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SIDE

NA

NA

NA

NA

50

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

NA

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

GLOSS TEXT

80

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

825

11

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

EA

1

NA

Marketing Commercial

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

5

B

PERFECT

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

2

PLAIN

20

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

85

11

NA

14

3LEFT

LEFT

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black

NA

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

100

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SIDE

NA

NA

NA

NA

50

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Item Description

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

NA

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

GLOSS TEXT

80

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

825

11

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish

dPrint

ContentComp

Split Shipment Indicator Flag

WCSS Item Number

Customer Item Number

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Producing Plant

Job Number

Replenishing Plant

Plant Code

Product Code

PackagingOrdering UOM

Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM

List Price Per Ea

Transfer Cost per Ea

Sell Price per Ea

Standard Cost (per Ea)

Min Order Qty (in eaches)

Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches

Chargeback Price

Item Reference 1

Item Reference 2

Revision Field

Max Order Qty (in eaches)

Sequentially Numbered Item

Sequentially Numbered Item - Details

Priced for Digital or Offset

Content File Location

Item Category Form (F) Book (B)

Item Subtype

Orientation

Sides Printed

CSSJLS Stock Componet

Paper Size Width

Paper Size Length

No of Forms to a Sheet

Page Qty

Sheets Qty

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

of Tabs

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)

Thermal Tape Color

Trim Size Width

Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drilling Size

Drilling Location

Glue Location

Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Poly

Box

Comments

Cross Reference Item Number 1

Publication Number

Publication Title

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure

Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure

Min Order Qty

Multiple Order Qty

Business Group

Cost Center

Revision Date

Max Order Qty

Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)

BindingStitching

Orientation

Sides Printed

Printing Paper Size Width

Printing Paper Size Length

Number of Forms to a Sheet

Page Count of Publication

Number of Sheets Required to Print

CSSJLS Production Stock

Paper Stock Type

Paper Stock Weight

Paper Stock Color

Stack Offset

Tab Size

Number of Tabs Needed

Binder Size

Binder Color

Binder Ring Type

Binder Transparency

Thermal Tape Color

Finished Trim Size Width

Finished Trim Size Length

Stitching Location

Drill Hole Size

Number and Location of Drill Holes

Glue Location

Number of Pages per Pad

Fold Type

Fold At

Number of Pieces per Poly wrap

Number of Pieces per Box

Comments

Part Number

Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup

The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8

Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items

Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number

30 characters maximum

Cannot use quote symbol that is----

Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item

Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su

Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant

Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)

Required Enter one of the applicable product

Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)

Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure

Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet

Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM

Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA

Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record

IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item

Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers

Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item

Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field

Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed

IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item

Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required

The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu

If item uses tabs otherwise NA

If needed otherwise type NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If item used in a binder otherwise NA

If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length

If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA

Click here for a list of possible drill locations

If publication uses padding otherwise NA

If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu

Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values

List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank

PK

1

See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group

100

B

SADDLE

PORTRAIT

HEAD2HEAD

RRD must provide this information

RRD must provide this information

White

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SIDE

NA

NA

NA

NA

50

RRD must provide this information

NA

NA

Field definitions

ampL01072008ampRampP

PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
	EA = Each
	PK = Pack
	PD = Pad
	RL = Roll
	BK = Book
	CT = Carton
	BX = Box
	ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
	Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
	The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
	CorporateBusiness Development
	Finance
	Human Resources
	IT
	Logistics
	Manufacturing
	Marketing Commercial
	Marketing Europe
	Marketing Other
	Operations
	Order Services
	Other
	Process Improvement
	Procurement
	Quality
	Sales
Max Order Quantity
	Presale items = 100
	Postsale items = 5
	NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
	Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
	Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
	For a Form (F) use
	CARBONLESS
	CUTSHEET
	ENVELOPE
	For a Book (B) use
	LOOSE		LOOSE -Loose Leaf
	PERFECT		PERFECT - Perfect Bound
	PLASTCOIL		PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
	SADDLE		SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
	STAPLED1		STAPLED1 -1 position
	STAPLED1B		STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
	STAPLED2		STAPLED2 - 2 positions
	THERMAL		THERMAL - Thermal bound
	THERMALO		THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
	Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
	Simplex = Single-sided printing
	Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
	Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
	Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
		Description
	PLAIN		Bond
	ACNTCVR		Accent Cover
	BOND3H		Bond (3-hole)
	BOOKENV		Booklet Envelope
	C1SGLOSS		C1S Gloss Finish
	C1SMATTE		C1S Matt Finish
	C2SGLOSS		C2S Gloss Finish
	C2SMATTE		C2S Matt Finish
	CARD		Card Stock
	CATLGENV		Catalog Envelope
	CATLGENV6		6 Catalog Envelope
	COVERCOLOR		Color Cover Copy
	CRCKPEEL		Crack N Peel Label
	CUSTOM		Custom
	CVRFUTURA		Futura Cover
	ENV6x9		Standard 6X9 Envelope
	ENV9X12		Standard 9X12 Envelope
Paper Stock Type continued
		Description
	ETHCERT		Ethicon Certificate
	GLOSSCOVER		Gloss Cover
	GLOSSTEXT		Gloss Text
	HOTSTEXT		Hots Text
	INDEX		Index
	LABEL80		80 Up Label
	MICROPRT		Micro Print
	OFFSET		Offset
	PART2		2 Part
	PART3		3 Part
	PART4		4 Part
	PART5		5 Part
	PART6		6 Part
	PERF		12 inch Perfed
	PERMMAT		Perm Mat Ad
	PRECUTTAB		Pre-Cut Tab
	PREPERF		Pre-Perforated
	RECYL		Recycled
	SE10ENV		10 Standard Envelope
	SE10ITENV		10 Inside Tint Envelope
	SE9ENV		9 Stanard Envelope
	TAG		Tag
	TEXT		Text
	TEXTCOLOR		Text Color Copy
	TEXTFUTURA		Futura Text
	TEXTLASER		Text Laser Print
	TRANSPRNCY		Transparencies
	VELLUM		Vellum
	VELLUM3HP		Vellum 3HP
	WE10ENV		10 Window Envelope
	WE9ENV		9 Windor Envelope
	WE9ITENV		9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
	Black
	Blue
	Buff
	Canary
	Cherry
	Clear
	Cream
	Custom
	Goldrenrod
	Gray
	Green
	Ivory
	Lavender
	Manilla
	NCRPinkCanary
	NCRWhiteBlue
	NCRWhiteBlueCanary
	NCRWhiteCanary
	NCRWhiteCanaryPink
	NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
	NCRWhiteGreen
	NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
	NCRWhitePink
	NCRWhiteWhite
	Opaque
	Orange
	Orchid
	Peach
	Pink
	Purple
	Salmon
	Tan
	Violet
	White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
	11 x 17
	18 x 24 Poster
	24 x 36 Poster
	3 x 5
	36 x 24 Poster
	4 x 6
	475 x 7
	475 x 775
	55 x 85
	6 x 4
	7 x 9
	7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
	85 x 11
	825 x 10875
	825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
	8375 x 10875
	9 x 12
	A4
	A5
	Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
	1CENTER
	1LEFTTOP
	1TOPCENTER
	2LEFT
	2LEFT2TOP
	2TOP
	2TOP2LEFT
	2TOP3LEFT
	2TOP5LEFT
	2TOP5RIGHT
	3BOTTOM
	3LEFT
	3LEFT2TOP
	3LEFT3TOP
	3RIGHT
	3TOP
	3TOP5LEFT
	5BOTTOOM
	5CENTER
	5LEFT
	5RIGHT
	5RIGHT2TOP
	5TOP
Fold Type
		Description
	HALF		Half
	C		C Fold
	DBLEPARLL		Double Parallel
	OFFSETZ		Offset Z
	SAMPLE		See Sample
	SHORT		Short Fold
	V		V Fold
	Z		Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
	Publication length		Number per Poly Wrap
	77 or more pages		NA
	33 to 76 pages		25
	3 to 32 pages		50
	1 or 2 pages		100
Comments
	CoverText Stock
	100 Gloss Cover
	100 Gloss Text
	100 Text
	10pt C1S Cover
	10pt C2S Cover
	10pt C2S Text
	10pt Text Stock
	110 White Index
	12pt C1S Cover
	20 White Opaque Bond
	50 Colored Offset
	50 White Offset
	50 White Opaque
	60 Cover Stock
	60 White Offset
	80 Gloss Cover
	80 Gloss Text
	8pt C1S White
	90 White Index
	CoverText Ink
	Black
	Black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	Black + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color
	4 color over black
	4 color + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color over black + 1 PMS color		Type in PMS color
	4 color + 2 PMS colors		Type in PMS colors
	4 color + aqueous
	4 color + varnish